Canon | EOS M10 | User guide | Canon EOS M10 User guide

Canon EOS M10 User guide
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱٤‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻓﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪© CANON INC. 2015‬‬
‫‪CEL-SW2RA2N0‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪* *SDHC‬‬
‫‪۲ ۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪* *SDXC‬‬
‫‪۲ ۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺟﺩ ﺃ ًّﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LP-E12‬‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LC-E12/LC-E12E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ‬
‫‪EM-200DB‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ UHS-I‬ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺅﺳﺳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻋﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﻭﺍ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺗﻧﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ٪۹۹٫۹۹‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫˺˺ ˹˺ ̂‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫́‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫˾‬
‫̀ ˿ ˾ ˺‬
‫˺˻ ˹˻‬
‫̂˺‬
‫́˺ ̀˺‬
‫˼‬
‫˻˺‬
‫˼˺‬
‫˽˺‬
‫˾˺‬
‫˿˺‬
‫˺˺‬
‫˼˺‬
‫˽˺‬
‫˽‬
‫˼‬
‫˿‬
‫˺‬
‫˻˺‬
‫˻‬
‫̀‬
‫́‬
‫̂‬
‫˾˺‬
‫˽‬
‫˹˺‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-M‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(*‪ / ۲‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMITM‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] )ﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ([‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪*(N‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۱‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ([‬
‫[‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ([‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ([ ‪/‬‬
‫] )ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ([ ‪ /‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ / [(AE‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ([‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺯﺭ ] )ﻓﻼﺵ([ ‪ /‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ([ ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪.(۱۱۳ =) NFC‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺍﺕ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫́‬
‫̀‬
‫˿‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫˼‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫˽‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫̂‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻟﺑﻲ ﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫˾‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫● = ‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ(‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﻳﻥ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ“ ﻭ”ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ“ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-M 15-‬‬
‫‪ 45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM‬ﻛﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ ”ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ ” ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ“ ﻭ” ﺃﻓﻼﻡ“ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪۲ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ‪۳ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪٥ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ‪٥ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ‪۱۳ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪۱٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۷ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ‪۱۷ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱۷ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۷ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۸ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۹ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱۹ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۹ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۲۰ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۲۰ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۲۱ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۲۱ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪۲۲ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪۲۲ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪۲۳ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪۲۳ ................................................................. EF-S‬‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪۲٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪۲٤ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۲٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪۲٥ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪۲٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲٦ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۲۷ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۲۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪۲۸ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪۲۹ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۲۹ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۲۹ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪۲۹ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۳۰ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۳۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ‪۳۱ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪۳۱ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۳۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۳۳ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۳۳ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۳٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‪۳٥ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۳٥ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪۳٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‪۳۷ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳۸ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۳۸ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۳۸ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳۸ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٤۰ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۱ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤۱ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ( ‪٤۲ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪٤۲ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ( ‪٥٥ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺗﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻓﻧﻲ ﺇﻳﺣﺎﺋﻲ(‪٥٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ( ‪٥٦ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ( ‪٥٦ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪٥۷ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ(‪٥۷ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ ‪٥۸ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ(‪٥۸ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٤۳ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٥۹ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪۳۹ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٤۰ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪٤۰ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪٤۳ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪٤٤ .....................................................................RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪٤٥ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪٤٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪٤٦ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٥۹ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪٦۰ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪٦۰ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪٦۰ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ‪٦۱ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻑ ‪٦۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪٤۷ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٤۷ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪٦۲ .................................................................................P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪٦۲ ..................................................... ([P‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ‪٤۸ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪٦۳ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( ‪٤۸ .................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٦۳ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪٤۹ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪٤۹ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪٥۰ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪٥۰ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٥۰ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻑ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‪٥۰ .................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ(‪٦۳ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦٤ .............................................. (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪٦٤ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٦٥ ..............................................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪٦٥ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ )ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٦٦ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ )ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ( ‪٦٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٥۲ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٦۷ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻟﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ )ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ(‪٥۱ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪٥۳ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻌﺎﻡ )ﻁﻌﺎﻡ( ‪٥۳ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( ‪٥٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ٍ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻧﻳﺔ ‪٥٤ .........................................................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪٦۷ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪٦۷ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ‪٦۸ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪٦۹ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪۷۱ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪۷۱ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۷۱ .............................................................‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪۷۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪۷۲ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ( ‪۷۲ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪۷۳ ...............................................................Servo AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪۷٤ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪۷٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪۷٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪۷٦ .............................. (MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷٦ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۷٦ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۷۷ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۷۷ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‪۷۷ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪۷۷ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪۷۷ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷۸ .................................................................... FE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۸ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۷۹ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪۷۹ ......................................................................... IS‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۸۰ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ‪۸۰ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪۸۱ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ‪۸۱ .........................................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ‪۸۲ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪۸۳ .............................................................. M‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸۳ ........................................................ ([Tv‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸٤ ..................................................... ([Av‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪۸٥ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸٥ ............................... ([M‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۸٦ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪۸۷ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۸۸ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۸۸ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۸۸ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪۹۰ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۹۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۹۱ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۹۲ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۹۳ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ‪۹۳ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ( ‪۹٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪۹٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪۹٤ ..............................................................RGB‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪۹٤ .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۹٥ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۹٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪۹٥ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۹٦ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺗﻳﻥ‪۹٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ‪۹٦ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹۷ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹۸ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۹۸ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۹ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹۹ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۰۰ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۱۰۰ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۱۰۰ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۱۰۱ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۱۰۱ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰۲ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۱۰۲ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۱۰۲ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۱۰۳ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۱۰۳ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪۱۰۳ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪۱۱۲ ...................................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ‪۱۱۲ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۱۳ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۳ .................................... NFC‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۱۱۳ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۱٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪۱۱٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱۱۷ ............................................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۱۸ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۱۱۸ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪۱۱۹ ............................................... WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪۱۲۰ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪۱۲۱ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ‪۱۲۱ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۱۲۱ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪۱۲۱ ...................................CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۲۳ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۱۲٤ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۰٥ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ‪۱۲٥ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪۱۰٦ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪۱۲٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۰٤ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۱۰٤ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ(‪۱۰٥ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰٦ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۰٦ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪۱۰۷ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪۱۰۸ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱۰۸ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱۰۹ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪۱۱۰ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ‪۱۱۰ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱۱۱ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۱۲۸ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۲۹ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۹ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۱۲۹ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۱۲۹ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺻﻧﻔﺔ‪۱۳۰ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۳۰ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۳۰ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱۳۱ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۳۱ ..................................................‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‪۱۳۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۳۲ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۳۲ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪۱۳۳ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪۱۳٤ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۳٥ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۳٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪۱۳٥ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۳٦ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ‪۱۳٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱۳۷ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪۱۳۷ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪۱۳۸ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۳۸ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۱۳۸ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱۳۸ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۳۹ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪۱۳۹ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪۱۳۹ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱٤۰ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱٤۰ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱٤۰ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱٤۱ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱٤۱ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱٤۱ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱٤۱ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ‪۱٤۲ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪۱٤۲ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‪۱٤۲ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۱٤۲ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۱٤۲ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪۱٤۲ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪۱٤۳ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪۱٤۳ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪۱٤٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٤٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‪۱٤٤ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪۱٤٥ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪۱٤٥ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‪۱٤٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪۱٤۷ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱٤۸ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪۱٤۸ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱٤۸ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۱٤۸ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪۱٤۹ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٤۹ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱٥۰ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۱٥۰ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱٥۱ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪۱٥۲ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪۱٥۲ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٥۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱٥۲ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٥۳ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱٥۳ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ ‪۱٥٤ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٥٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٥٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٥٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪۱٥۷ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱٥۷ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٥۷ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٥۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪۱٥۸ ...............................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٥۸ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ‪۱٥۹ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥۹ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٥۹ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱٥۹ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٦۰ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۱٦۰ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪۱٦۰ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٦۰ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱٦۰ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ‪۱٦۱ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪۱٦۱ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱٦٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱٦۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٦۷ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱٦۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱٦۸ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱٦۸ ....................................................................... ۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱٦۸ ....................................................................... ۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱٦۸ ....................................................................... ۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱٦۸ ....................................................................... ٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱٦۹ ....................................................................... ٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱٦۹ ....................................................................... ٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٦۹ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪۱۷۰ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۷۰ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪۱۷۲ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۷٤ .......................................................................‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪۱۷۹ ......................................................................... C.Fn‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪۱۸۰ .......................................................................INFO.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“ ‪۱۸۰ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ ‪۱۸۱ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۱۸۱ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱۸۲ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪۱۸۳ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪۱۸۳ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۸۳ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۸۳ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۱۸٤ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۱۸٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۱۸٤ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ‪۱۸٥ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۸٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪۱۸٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۱۸٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱۸٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ‪۱۸٦ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۸۷ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۸۷ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪۱۸۷ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪۱۸۷ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ‪۱۸۷ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ( ‪۱۸۸ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱۸۸ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱۸۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪۱۸۸ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۸۸ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۸۹ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪۱۸۹ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪۱۹۰ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۹۰ ...............................................................LP-E12‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۹۰ ............................................... LC-E12/LC-E12E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۱۹۱ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‪۱۹٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪۱۹٤ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۱۹٤ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪۱۹٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱۹٦ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ(‬
‫‪۳۷ = ،۳٥ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪٤۸ = -‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺑﻬﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(Tv‬‬
‫ = ‪۸۳‬‬‫● ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻟﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ )ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪٥۱ = -‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ = ‪۳٦‬‬‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ = ‪٤۰‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ = ‪۹۱‬‬‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫ = ‪۹۹‬‬‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۱٥۰ = -‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۹۱ = -‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫‪٤۲ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻣﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱۰۲ = -‬‬
‫● ﺗﺑﻬﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(Av‬‬
‫‪۸٤ = -‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۹٥ = -‬‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٥۹ = ،۳٥ = -‬‬
‫● ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪٥۳ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۱٥۲ = -‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ = ‪۱٥٤‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫● ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ = ‪۱٥۳‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ = ‪۱۱۳‬‬‫● ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ = ‪۱۲۱‬‬‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۱۳۱ = -‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻫﻧﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻙ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻁﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﻙ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ( ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺃﺫﻯ ﺑﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﻙ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻭﺍﺻﻑ ﺭﻋﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺑﺗﻌﺩ ﻋﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺷﻭﻓﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛ ّﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻟﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻏﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻏﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﻣﻌﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺩ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﱠﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺭﺍﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻁﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎ ًء ﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻠﺩ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺣﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺭﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻼً ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺿﻌﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻳﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻛﻙ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺗﻙ ﺑﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺗﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻠﺗﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﻯ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ– ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺟﻠﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫˽‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫˼‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﻘﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫˺‬
‫‪LC-E12‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪LC-E12E‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫● ‪ :LC-E12E‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :LC-E12‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺗﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪“LC-E12/LC-E12E‬‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۹۰‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺗﺫﻛﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺋﻲ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫)‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫● ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫˺‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫˻‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ )‪ (۱‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺗﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ )‪ (۲‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪،۲‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺛﻡ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 2‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪(۲۰‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻳﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ( ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪ ،(۱٤۸= ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۲۰‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 2‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .EF-M‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪ EF-S‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪.(۲۳ =) EF-EOS M‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻓﻪ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ )ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ (۱‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˼‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﺑﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ )‪.(۳‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻌﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺑﺭً ﺍ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱٫٦‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٤٥-۱٥‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻓ ًﺋﺎ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻗﺩﺭﻩ ‪ ۷۲-۲٤‬ﻣﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪ EF-S‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪.EF-EOS M‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ“ )= ‪ (۲۲‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ،EF‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ،EF-S‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ )ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺩﻋﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺻﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺻﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ )ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺑﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”‪.“IS‬‬
‫● ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣُﺛﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] [ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ )‪ (۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫˼‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )‪ (۲‬ﻭﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ (۳‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ )= ‪ ،(۸۰‬ﺗﺿﻳﻕ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪ ،(۲۹‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ EF-M‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺿﻳﻕ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪ ،(۲۹‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ”ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ )= ‪.(۱٤۰‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪(۱۱۲ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪.(۱٥۳‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪) .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻏﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻛﺳﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[ < ]ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪/‬ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫[ < ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(۹۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۱۷۲‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪.(۱۸۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٤٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫)‪.(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫[ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ )‪ ،(۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )] [( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )] [( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫)] [(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )‪ .(۲‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[ 1‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٤٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ )= ‪.(۱۸۱ = – ۱۷٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ (۱۱۲ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ )‪ (۱‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺭﻑ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻁﻭﻻً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪ (۱٥۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪،۲۹‬‬
‫= ‪(۱٤۰ = ،۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ )= ‪ ،(۸٥ = ،۸۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳٤‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣُﺛﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(۳۹‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] [ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻌﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳُﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺟﺯءًﺍ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ] []‬
‫]‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ(‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳٥‬ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳٦‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫‪ .PAL‬ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺣﻣﻲ )= ‪.(۹۹‬‬‫ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )= ‪ (۲۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )= ‪ (۱۳۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬‫)= ‪ (۱٤۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )= ‪.(۱٤٤‬‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۱۳۸‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ < ]ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ )= ‪.(۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٤۷‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻔﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ )‪ (۱‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻠﻳﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ“ )= ‪.(۱۹۰‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ )= ‪ ،(۸۰‬ﺗﺿﻳﻕ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 5‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[ < ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [Movie Servo AF] < [ 5‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻣﻪ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺻﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺷﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺻﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺭﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻛﺷﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ“ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ”ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ“ ﻭ“ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ( ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺗﺑﻌﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،Servo AF‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Servo AF‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺑﺩﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪ .[ 4‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ“ )= ‪ (۳۹‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺑﺩﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪ (٤۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤۰‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪) .‬ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۸٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 1‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(٤۲‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﺑﻊ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪ .(۱٦۷‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۸‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺟﻡ )ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ( ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ .(٤٤ =) RAW‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩًﺍ )ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ] [ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ] [ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪] < [ 1‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪.3:2‬‬
‫‪ ٤۲۰) A2‬ﻣﻡ × ‪ ٥۹٤‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪ ۲۹۷) A3‬ﻣﻡ × ‪ ٤۲۰‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪ ۲۱۰) A4‬ﻣﻡ × ‪ ۲۹۷‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪ ۱۳۰ x ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ۱۸۰ x ۱۳۰ ،‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫● ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ]‪.[RAW‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ]‪.[RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻠﻬﺎ؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ”ﺧﺎﻡ“ )ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪ (۱٥۲ = ،Professional‬ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ TIFF‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ”‪.(۱٥۲ =) “EOS Utility‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻭ ‪ .JPG‬ﻭﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻭ ‪ .CR2‬ﺃﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻳﻥ ‪ Digital Photo Professional‬ﻭ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪ ،Utility‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺿﻣﻥ ]‪ .[RAW‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪.[−‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[JPEG‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪.[−‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻭ]‪ [JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [−‬ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۸۰ x ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪] < [ 1‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(۱۳۹ =) PAL‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ۲۹٫۹۷‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ‬
‫‪ ۲۳٫۹۸‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻧﻣﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ٥۹٫۹٤‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪.(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ۲۹٫۹۷‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ۲٥٫۰۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ٥۰٫۰۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪.(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ۲٥٫۰۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء )ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫ﻭ]‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭ]‬
‫[( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪] < [ 5‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ 4 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺧﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻬﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﺎﻫﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﺳﻧﻰ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[(‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻭﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺯﻫﺎء ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺯﻫﺎء ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻓ ًﺋﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻫﺩﻭءًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ] :‬ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ[ ﺃﻭ ] ﺑﻧﻲ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ] ﺃﺯﺭﻕ[ ﺃﻭ ] ﺃﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ] ﺃﺧﺿﺭ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺷﺑﻊ[ ﻭ]ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻭﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺗﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]–[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻛﻳﻑ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [‪ .‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫[‬
‫)‪ (A‬ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (a‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸٤‬‬
‫)‪ (B‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫)‪ (b‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ )= ‪ (٦۳‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ )‪ ،(‘b‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ )= ‪(۷۷‬‬
‫)‪ (C‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫)‪ (c‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫)‪ (D‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫)‪ (d‬ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫)‪ (E‬ﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬
‫)‪ (F‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪ (e‬ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫)‪ (f‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻟﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺳﻧﺔ ﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٥۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“ )= ‪.(۳۷‬‬
‫ً‬
‫[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ] [‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥۹‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻔﺗﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺗﻣﻳﺯﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻟﺯﻫﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺃﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ً‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁﺎ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﻛﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻬﺭﻳﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ )ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﻁﻭﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ )ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ”‪ “STM‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫)ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (٦٥ =) ISO‬ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻌﺎﻡ )ﻁﻌﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻣﻧﺣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ )= ‪.(۳٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻌﺎﻡ ﻁﺎﺯﺟً ﺎ ﻭﺷﻬﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۳‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻋﺎ ٍﻝ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺷﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻧﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻧﻲ ﺣﻳﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻧﻲ ﺇﻳﺣﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻧﻲ ﻣﺯﺧﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﻓﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻭﺗﻅﻠﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺗﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻓﻧﻲ ﺇﻳﺣﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﱢ ﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﻣﻭﺳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋُﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻭﻣﻣﻭﺟﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )= ‪ (۱۳۹‬ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[NTSC‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ]‬‫[ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[PAL‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ]‬‫[ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻓ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻫﺩﻭءًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ ﻭﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﺧﺷﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎءﻩ‪) .‬ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪ (.‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ (۳۸ =) [Movie Servo AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺿﻳﻕ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ )= ‪.(۸۰‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪) .‬ﻻ ُﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪< (۳۲ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ AF] < [ 5‬ﻣﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ )ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،(۱٦:۹‬ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،(٤:۳‬ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎءﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ −3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪. +3‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪5‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ“ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪/‬ﻣﺧﻔﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻑ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻑ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻭﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻭ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ“ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪/‬ﻣﺧﻔﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۱‬‬
‫● ﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺧﻔﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ )= ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ )= ‪– ٦۳‬‬
‫= ‪ ،(۸۲‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲ = ،۳۱‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪ INFO.‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪.“INFO.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪.“INFO.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ –3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+3‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫< ]ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪ ،“INFO.‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ]–[]‪.[+‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩًﺍ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺻﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ(‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺑـ ‪ “INFO.‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪ ،“INFO.‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،AE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ )ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺛﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 3‬‬
‫< ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪[ISO‬‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 3‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪] < [ISO‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.[ISO‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [H‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ،(ISO 25600‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۳۲ =) MENU‬‬
‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ :C.Fn I] < [ 1‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ[ < ]ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ‪:۱] < [ISO‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ) ُﻣﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ )ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﺎﻣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺣﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪[D+‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ”ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ“ ﺿﻌﻳ ًﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫< ]ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[D+‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .100‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ (WB‬ﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﻳﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺟّ ﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪4‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺗﺎﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ“ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﻣّﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٦۷‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۷‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ [.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫“[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‬
‫] [ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [‬
‫]‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪) ٪۱۸‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ( ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭ ًﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۸‬‬
‫● ‪ :B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ؛ ‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :G‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﺭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ(‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 4‬‬
‫< ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٦۷‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫ﺑـ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪.A‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﺟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺧﺎﺻ ٍﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻭﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﻏﺭﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻏﺭﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻷﻏﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺣﻳﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻠﺹ‬
‫‪٦۹‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑًﺎ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ )= ‪.(۷۰‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻬﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻻﺣﻕ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻁﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻻﺣﻕ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻘﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥۲۰۰‬ﻛﻠﻔﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻁﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﺯﻡ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫[ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻊ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪] < [ 4‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ )ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻣﻳًﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﻣ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﺣﻣﺭﺍﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻔﺭﺍﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ*‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ*‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻹﺑﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺟﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ :N‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Ye‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ :Or‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻣًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :R‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺎﻗﻁﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ :G‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪:N] :‬ﻻﺷﻲء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪:S‬ﺑﻧﻲ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪:B‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ[ ﺃﻭ]‪:P‬ﺃﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪:G‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻊ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫)ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(“ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ[ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫[( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺛﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻛﺄﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ )ﻣﺛﻝ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫”ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(“ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻣ ًﻁﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻛﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪.(۱٥۲ =) Utility‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻘﺻﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﺃﻭ ‪.EF-S‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 2‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫● ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺛﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ )= ‪ .(۷۲‬ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟّ ﻪ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٤ – ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ“‬
‫)= ‪ .(۷٥‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺧﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻲء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ )= ‪.(۷۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻠﻣﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ] [ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 1‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ < ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺣﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪ (٤۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[ONE SHOT‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Servo AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [ONE SHOT‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.(۳۱ =) [SERVO‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ Servo AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ] ‪ +‬ﺗﺗﺑﻊ[ )= ‪.(۷۲‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ Servo AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪ (٤۲‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ”‪ “STM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ .Servo AF‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،Servo AF‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 2‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺟﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ EF-M‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﻱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪[AF+MF‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ]‪ [MF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۷۳‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪.EF-M‬‬
‫‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ :EF-M‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ[ < ]‪[MF‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ :‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[MF‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[MF‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﺳﻳﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۷٥‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻭ‪.10x‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪) 1x‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ( ﻭ‪5x‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻳﺳﻳﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ( ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ“ )= ‪.(۱۹۰‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ MF‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ [MF‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷٦‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] [ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻏﺎﻣﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺑﺎﻫﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺄﻓﺿﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 3‬‬
‫< ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ ،(٦۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ < ]ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(٦٤ =) AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،FE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[؛ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪.FE‬‬
‫● ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﺃﻭﻝ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ[ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ 1/100‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ]ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫]ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ [E-TTL II‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ EF-M‬ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ .EF-M‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ )= ‪.(۲٤‬‬
‫● ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”‪ .“IS‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪“IS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۷۹‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.(۳۲ =) [2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻠﺯﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪.EF-M‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟـ ‪ ۳۰‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ‪ EOS Utility‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪.(۱٥۲ =) Utility‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ[ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.(۱٥۲ =) Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫]ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ (۱٥۲ =) Digital Photo Professional‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ‪] :‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪] ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[‪] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ .‬ﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ (۱٥۲ =) EOS Utility‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺫﻱ ﻋﻣﺭ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻓﻲ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪ Professional‬ﺑﻘﻠﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻗﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ“‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ )ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺛﻼً(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻊ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ[ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﻳﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 1600‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [ON‬ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([Tv‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ“ )= ‪.(۱۸٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺫﻛﺎ ًء ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﻌﻘﻳ ًﺩﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [ON‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ 1/200‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/200‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([Av‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫● ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ 1/200‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸٤‬‬
‫● ]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭً ﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ (۹۰‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ“ )= ‪ .(۱۸٥‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫] [] [ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(۳) ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )‪(۱‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ ،(۲‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫˼‬
‫˻‬
‫˽‬
‫˾‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪ ،(٥‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ )‪.(٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﻋﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ .[AUTO‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪ .(٦٦‬ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫● ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]‬
‫ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ .[ 3‬ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‪] ،‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪] ،‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ < ]ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ“ )= ‪ .(۱۸٥‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٥۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﻋﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۳‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[AUTO‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺗﻣﻭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ،LED‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺩﻗﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﺣﺟﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[ < ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ ،RGB‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[ < ]ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]‪.(۳۲ =) [ 1‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫)]ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺃﺧﺭﻯ[(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ]ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺃﺧﺭﻯ[‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫[(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ )‪(LED‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:1‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ [H] ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪:1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪ .‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ]‪ [H‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،ISO 25600‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ISO 12800‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪:1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ )= ‪.(۹۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪:1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪ [(C.Fn‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [H‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،(٦٦ =) [D+‬ﺣﻧﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ [ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﻭ ] [ )ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫[( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۸۸‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺃﺧﺭﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫] [ )ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ ،AF/AE‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ [AE‬ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ‪ .AE‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺃﻓﻼﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻝ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻻ ﻳﻌﻳّﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ[ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻭﺗﺻﻔﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ؛‬
‫ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﻣﺧﻔﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫< ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۳۲ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ < ]ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ[ < ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۳۲ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬‫] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ‬‫”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻼ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪“۱‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪) “۲‬ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ )= ‪.(۱٦۸‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪4‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺛﻣﺔ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ .[2‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺛﻡ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ [2‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ (۹۳ =) ٦ – ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺑﺎﻫﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻛﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ٦ – ۲‬ﺷﻛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ“‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﺑﻳّﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪RGB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ۳‬ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ RGB‬ﻳﺑﻳّﻥ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ R‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،B‬ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪.(۹۳‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۷‬‬
‫‪۹٤‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] []‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ[‬
‫< ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫● ﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹۹‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۰۲‬ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۳۷‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻛﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺛﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻻﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪” (۳‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪ (۹٥‬ﻭ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۹۸‬ﻭ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪ .(۹۹‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۹۹‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“ )= ‪ (۱۰۲‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪“(DPOF‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥۸‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱٦۰‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۸ = – ۱۰٦‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]‪1‬‬
‫[ < ]ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪،‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ )ﻓﺭﺩ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻌﻳﻥ( ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 10x‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ )‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10x‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌَ ﺭَ ﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ[‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[(‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (۲۹‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ[ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۹‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﺂﺧﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺃﻭ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۹۹‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ [ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ‪ [JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ‪+JPEG‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪ (۱۰۰‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪.[ ] (۱۰۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۱۰٤‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ [ ]) ٥ – ۱‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫] [ ﺃﻭ ] [(‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪” ،(۹۱‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪” ،(۹۹‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(۹۹‬ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(۱۰۲‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪” ،(۱٥۸ =) “(DPOF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪(۱٦۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۰۸ = – ۱۰٦‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫[ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫)= ‪ (۹۸‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪< [ 2‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫●]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫●]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۳۲ =) [ 2‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.(۳۷ = ،‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۸‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● )‪ (۱‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ)‪ (۲‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪،(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫˻‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﺯء ﻟﻘﺻﻪ )ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺑـ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﻣﻥ ] [( ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺹ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫[]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻗﺻﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺩﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪.(۱٤۸ = ،‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ( )= ‪ (۳۷‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (۹٤‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۹٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻻً ”ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪.*DLNA‬‬
‫* ‪Digital Living Network Alliance‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻡ ‪(DPS over IP‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪(۱۱۳ =) NFC‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪) NFC‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ OS‬ﻫﻭ ‪4.0‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ( ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪(۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(۱۱٥‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۱۱۷ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ )ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣُﺿﻣﱠﻧﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﺣﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻭﻥ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪ Remote‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ Camera Connect‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪NFC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪) Android‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ OS‬ﻫﻭ ‪ 4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ( ﻟﺗﻳﺳﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫)= ‪ .(۱۳٤‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫●ﻧ ّ‬
‫ﺷﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Google Play‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪Camera‬‬
‫‪ ،Connect‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺻﻁﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺟﺭﺏ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻟﺗﺫﻛﻳﺭﻙ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻟﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .(۱۳٦ =) ۳‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺗﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬
‫[‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۱۳۷ =) ۲‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .( ) NFC‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪< [ 4‬‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [NFC] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪(۱۱۳ =) Camera Connect‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻟﻙ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪،‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪ (۱۱۳‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ NFC‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪SSID‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻹﻗﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۱۳۷ =) ۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲=) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 4‬‬
‫< ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻧﺎ ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً‬
‫ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )= ‪.(۱۱٥‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪SSID‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻹﻗﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۸‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۸‬ﻟﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .(۱۳٦ =) ۸‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺗﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۱۳۷ =) ۲‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٥‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪] < [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ ﺑﻌﺩﺋ ٍﺫ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪) SSID‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪.(۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪WPS) Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫= ‪ (۱۱۹‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ )= ‪ .(۱۲۰‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ُﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ /‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪WPA2-PSK :‬‬
‫)‪ (AES‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA-PSK (AES‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA-PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) WEP‬ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ WEP‬ﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ”‪ “۱‬ﻛﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ‪ WPS‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬
‫‪.“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪< [Wi-Fi‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪.[MAC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ‪ WPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۱۱۷ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪،[WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،[PBC‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﻟﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۱۱۹ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۹ – ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (۱۱۷ =) “Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٥‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۹ – ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (۱۱۷ =) “Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﺗﺻﻠﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ]*[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ“ )= ‪ (۱۱٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۱۱۷ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (۱۱۹ =) “WPS‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱۲۰‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ )‪ ،Microsoft Internet Explorer‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )‪.(/http://www.canon.com/cig‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ُﺗﻔﺭَ ﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ http://www.canon.com/cig/‬ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ )ﻣﺟﺎ ًﻧﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﻫﻧﺎ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪،۷‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٦‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫‪۱۲۲‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )= ‪.(۱۱٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۰‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑـ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺗﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۱۳۷ =) ۳‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً )= ‪.(۱۲۱‬‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪٦‬‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻭ] [ )= ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻛﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ“ )= ‪ (۱۲۳‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ (۱۲۱ =) “GATEWAY‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ[‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،DLNA‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ“ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ ”ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ“ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺑﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۷‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۰‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ]‪Canon EOS M10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﻳﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ]‪.[ Canon EOS M10‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ < [ Canon EOS M10‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )‪SD‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ( < ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ < ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺷﻐﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ”‪.“MediaServ‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ”‪ “۱۰۰-۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻌﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛ ًﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۷‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٥٤‬‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠ ﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS‬ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۷‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۲۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۲۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪ (۱۰۳‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻣﺣﺩﺩ ) (‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪،‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺻﻧﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻳﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ )= ‪.(۱۰٥‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۲۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻛﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻳﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﺗﻌﻠﻳ ًﻘﺎ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪Image Transfer Utility‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺟﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺿّ ﻑ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺿﻑ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.(۱۲۱ =) “CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ (۱۲۳ =) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪.iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۳۲ =) [ 4‬‬
‫‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺯﺭ )= ‪.(۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Image Transfer Utility‬‬
‫● ﺛﺑّﺕ ‪ Image Transfer Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )= ‪.(۱٥۳‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪ Image Transfer Utility‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪/Image Sync‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.(۱۳۱ =) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻧﻭﻱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ“ )= ‪ (۱۲٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪.(۱٤۸ = ،‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .GATEWAY‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ ،iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ )‪ ،Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ iPhones‬ﺃﻭ ‪iPads‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪ App Store‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ Android‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪.Google Play‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫● ﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(۱۲۱ =) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪.GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ ،Canon Online Photo Album‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Canon Online Photo Album‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺄﺧﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺗﺟﺏ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳٦ = ،۱۱٤‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪،۱۱۳‬‬
‫= ‪.(۱۱٥‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )= ‪(۱۳٦‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )= ‪(۱۳٦‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )= ‪(۱۳٥‬‬
‫‪ : O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ – ‪ :‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ )= ‪(۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺿﻳﺔ[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۰۰‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻟﺔ( ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۳۲ =) [ 4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۳۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۳۲ =) [ 4‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻋِ ﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۱٤٥ =) [ 4‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﻭ]‪ [ 2‬ﻭ]‪ [ 3‬ﻭ]‪.[ 4‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺭﺍءﻯ ﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺄﻛﺑﺭ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻳﻭﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )‪ (0001 – 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٫۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ (9999‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ،0001‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‪.(۱۳۹ = ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﻠﻥ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )=‪ ،(۱۳۹‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۳۹‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻷﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 2‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺷﺭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (۱٤۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ (.[ 2‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۲۰‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۷‬‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ] ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۲۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻔﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )= ‪ (۳۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ .(٦۳‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪،[ 3‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻗﻔﻝ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺭﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺟﻡ‪/‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪،[ 3‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻻ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺣﺳﺎﺱ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻳﺩﻭ ًﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻧﺎ ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺑﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺿﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫[ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻔﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ُﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺧﻠﻑ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺗﺎﺋﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺣﺫﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻭﺍء ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺧﺩﺵ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ُﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺗﺎﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻧﺩﻓﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺟﻣﺩ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ (۱٥۲ =) EOS Utility‬ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻗﺑﻭﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۱٤٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) [Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪(۱۱۲ =) ([ 4‬‬
‫● ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ[ )ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪(۱۱٥ =) ([ 4‬‬
‫● ]‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ[ )ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪) ([ 4‬ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪،[ 4‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﻫﻭ ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )= ‪(۱۳۹‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] [ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ )=‪ (۱٤۱‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )=‪(۱٤۱‬‬‫ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ )= ‪(۱٤۱‬‬
‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 1‬‬‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(٥۲‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۱۱۲ =) Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )= ‪(۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﻕ ﻟﻙ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪Connect Station‬‬
‫‪CS100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-M‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪*IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ‬
‫‪*EM-200DB‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪Mount Adapter‬‬
‫‪EF-EOS M‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ‬
‫‪EM-E2‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HTC-100‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*LC-E12/LC-E12E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪SD/SDHC/SDXC‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪ACK-E12‬‬
‫* ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۷‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*LP-E12‬‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫‪GR-E3‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺍﺏ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪EH28-FJ‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺍﺏ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪EH28-CJ‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ACK-E12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF-M‬ﻭ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻔﺿﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪ EF-S‬ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪.EF-EOS M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪EF-EOS M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.EF-S‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺟﺭﺍﺏ ‪ EH28-CJ‬ﻟﻠﻬﻳﻛﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺩﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺭﺍﺏ ‪ EH28-FJ‬ﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E12‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E12/LC-E12E‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E12‬‬
‫‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ‪GR-E3‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺣﻛﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪Connect Station CS100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ ‪EM-E2‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﻧﻕ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﻣﺭﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ IFC-200U‬ﻭ‪ IFC-500U‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ٍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺗﻳﻥ ”‪ -MF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ“ )= ‪ (۷٥‬ﻭ“ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬
‫‪.(۷٦ =) “MF‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E12‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ“ )= ‪(۱۹‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ )‪ (۱‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺛﻠﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ“ )= ‪.((۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ“ )= ‪(۱۹‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺻِ ﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺭﺡ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫● ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ‪Image Transfer Utility‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪Picture Style Editor‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪ Image Transfer Utility‬ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪/Image Sync‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫‪Mac OS‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.10‬‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.10‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ .(۱‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ (۲‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪.EOS Utility‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ EOS Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ EOS Utility‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫‪.Dock‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ EOS Utility‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Download images to computer‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ[ < ]‪Start automatic‬‬
‫‪/download‬ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪/Pictures‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ‪ ،EOS Utility‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪.(RAW‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ؛ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ )= ‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٤‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٤۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٥‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱٥٤‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٥‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫)= ‪ (۹۸‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳ ًﻁﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٦‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ L‬ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.3:2‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱٥٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٤‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﻳﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳّﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٥ – ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪،(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (۱٦۰‬ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ )‪.DPOF (Digital Print Order Format‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ”ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ“ ﻭ“ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺭﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۳۲ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 2‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪.(۲۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ”ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬
‫”ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪ (۱۰۰‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺭﺍء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٦۰‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٦۰‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٦۰‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺅ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ )= ‪.(۱۹ = ،۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ﻣﺛﻼً ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺗﺭ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻔﺧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ EF-M‬ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺿﻳﻕ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪ ،(۹۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )= ‪.(۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦٥ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫]‬
‫[ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ)‪ (LED‬ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪ [AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:۰‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪.(۷۲‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻏﺎﻟﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺎﻫﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ “AE‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ“ )= ‪.(٦٤ = ،٦۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ “AE‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ“ )= ‪.(٦٤ = ،٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۹۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۸٦ = ،۷۷‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦٥ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۹۰‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۸٦ = ،۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻛﺎﺱ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦٥ =) ISO‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺧﻁﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺧﻁﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺑًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻭﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺧﻁﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ TS-E‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪ .(٤۷‬ﺳﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪ (٤‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺭﺏ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﺟﺄﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ۱۰۰۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺭّ ﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺄﻧﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“‪ ،‬ﻭ“ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ ﻭ“ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ ﻭ“ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ “C.Fn‬ﻭ“ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪ “INFO.‬ﻭ“ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۰ = – ۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ”ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ“ )= ‪ (۱٦۷‬ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭّ ﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬‫ ﺍﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻼ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﻅﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪ (۹۱‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺿﻌﻳ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٥٦‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻟﻎ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛ ًّﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )= ‪.(۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ .(۱۸۸‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪/Image Sync‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪ .(۱۳۱‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪/.‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(۱۳۷ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺟﺏ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻣﻲ! )= ‪(۹۹‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪/MOV‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪MP4‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ )*( ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ* )= ‪ (۹۸‬ﻭﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ* )= ‪ (۱۰٤‬ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ* )= ‪ (۱۰٦‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ* )= ‪(۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ* )= ‪.(۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ ،(۱٥۹ = ،۱۰۳ = ،۱۰۰‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ!‬
‫ﺣﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۳۹‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ .(۱٦۰‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۱٦۰‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹۹‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ )= ‪ (۱۰۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (٦۲ = ،٤۸ = ،۳٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۱۰۲‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪ ،(۱۳۸‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۹‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟـ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ )= ‪.(۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۸‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ) ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻣﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥٤‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )= ‪ .(۱٥٦‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺻﺣﻳﺣً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ُﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺗﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺗﻛﻔﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻭﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﻣﺯﻳﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫˹˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫̀˺‬
‫̂˺‬
‫́˺‬
‫˾˺‬
‫˿˺‬
‫˼˺‬
‫˽˺‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫˾˻‬
‫˿˻‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫̀˻‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫́˻‬
‫̀‬
‫̂‬
‫̂‬
‫˹˺‬
‫˺˺‬
‫˻˺‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۹‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(٦٤ =) AE‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۰‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫)‪ (۳۱‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (۳۲‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫)= ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۳‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪(۱٦۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۱‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )= ‪(۳۱‬‬
‫˻‬
‫)‪ (۲۲‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪(۷٥‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۳‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(۳۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٤‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪(۷۱ =) AF‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٥‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫˼‬
‫)‪ (۳٤‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٦٥ =) ISO‬‬
‫)‪ (۳٥‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۳٦‬ﻣﺧﻔﻑ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۷‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۸‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱٤۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۹‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪(۱٤۰‬‬
‫)‪ (٤۰‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫)‪(٦۰ =) Movie Servo AF (٤۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٦‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫˽˼ ˼˼‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫˻˼‬
‫˺˼‬
‫˹˼‬
‫̂˻‬
‫˹˽‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫˺˽‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ )= ‪(۳۷‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(۳۸‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،(۱۷۰‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬
‫)= ‪(۳۹‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪(٤۲‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ)= ‪(۷٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫̂˼ ́˼ ̀˼ ˿˼ ˾˼‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)= ‪(۸٦ = ،۷۷‬‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱٦۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۸‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )= ‪(۷٥‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )= ‪(۹٤‬‬
‫˽‬
‫˾‬
‫˿‬
‫˺˻‬
‫˻˻‬
‫˼˻‬
‫˽˻‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۷‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(٤۲‬‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫]ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ—ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ—ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫́ ̀‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫˿‬
‫˽‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫˾‬
‫˼‬
‫̂‬
‫̀ ˾‬
‫́ ˿‬
‫˼ ˻‬
‫˺‬
‫˼˺ ˻˺‬
‫˾‬
‫˺˺‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫˹˺ ̂‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫́˺‬
‫̀˺‬
‫˿˺‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫˾˺‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫˽˺ ˼˺‬
‫˻˺‬
‫˺˺ ˹˺‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ*‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫[‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء“ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫˾˺‬
‫˽˺‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ*‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟـ ‪ .RGB‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“‬
‫= ‪.۹۱‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪.(۱٥٤ =) PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )= ‪) (۱۱۱‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪) (۱۱۱‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪(۱۱۱ = ،‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦۹‬‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪100 – 6400‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪12800‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ )= ‪(۷۷‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۸٦‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸٤‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٦٥ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(٦٤ = ،٦۰ =) AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(۷۸ =) FE‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪(۷۲ =) AF‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(۷۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ )= ‪(۷٥‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(٤۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪*(٥۹‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(٦۳ = ،۳۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪/۱‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪/۲‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪INFO.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(۷۳‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪*۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*۳‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪*۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷٤‬‬
‫‪(٤۲ =) Drive Mode‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*۳‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪5‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ )= ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻛﺳﻲ )= ‪(۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ )= ‪*(٤۷‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫)= ‪(٤۲‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪۱۷٤‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ 2/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ 8/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(۷۳‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪(۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ )= ‪(۷٤‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪MF / AF+MF‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪(۷٦ =) MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪*IS‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪IS‬‬
‫)= ‪(۷۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁ*‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸۰‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EF-S‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF-M‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ )= ‪(٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ)= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪E-TTL II.‬‬
‫)= ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫)= ‪(٤۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ)= ‪(۷٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫)= ‪(۸٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫)= ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )= ‪(۷۹‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ )= ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(۳۷‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۷‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ )= ‪(۸۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ )= ‪(٤۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪5‬‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭ]‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫[ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‪] :‬‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﺧﻔﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۸‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪/ONE SHOT‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪/‬ﻣﺧﻔﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪(٥۹ =) Movie Servo AF‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫)= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪C.Fn‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬
‫)= ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ :C.Fn II‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ)‪(LED‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪:C.Fn III‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ :0‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ :0‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪ :0‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AE‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪ :0‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ :0‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪(۸۸ =) (C.Fn‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪INFO.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪ (٦۳ =) INFO.‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‪ [ ] :‬ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [‬
‫ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫= ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ‪/‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪Drive Mode‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫= ‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬
‫= ‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻔﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫= ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫= ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫= ‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪* *.*.* :‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‪] :‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫= ‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪۱۸۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪۹٦‬‬
‫= ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫= ‪۹٤‬‬
‫= ‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ‬
‫= ‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫= ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫= ‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫= ‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬
‫= ‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫= ‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪٥۰‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ]‬
‫= ‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫[‪] :‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻟﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻗﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺛﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﻳﻑ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۲‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻛﺷﻭ ًﻓﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺳﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﺗﺟﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺧﺩﺵ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻠﺗﺻﻕ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻳﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪AF/AE‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ‪ ۱٫٦‬ﺿﻌﻑ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫‪) S2‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ‪ :(۲‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3٫5‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫)‪(2304 x 1536‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪EF-EOS M‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ EF-M‬ﻣﻥ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪) S3‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ‪ :(۳‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۳٥۰,۰۰۰‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ )‪(720 x 480‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۳‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۲٫٤‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫)‪(4320 x 2880‬‬
‫• ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪UHS-I‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱٤٫۹ x ۲۲٫۳‬ﻣﻡ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪(APS-C‬‬
‫‪ EF-M‬ﻭ‪ *EF‬ﻭ‪ *EF-S‬ﻣﻥ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Design rule for Camera File system 2.0‬‬
‫‪ ۱٤) RAW ،JPEG‬ﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۷٫۹‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫‪) L‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‪:‬‬
‫)‪(5184 x 3456‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪) CMOS‬ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪(Hybrid CMOS AF II‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۸٫۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۸٫٥‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ /‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫‪) S1‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ‪ :(۱‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫)‪(2880 x 1920‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۷٫۹‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫‪:RAW‬‬
‫)‪(5184 x 3456‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ”ﻳﻭﻣﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺷﻬﺭﻱ“‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﻠﺹ‪ ،‬ﻟﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪۳ - ۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ )ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻅﻝ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺿﻭء ﺗﺎﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺿﻭء‬
‫ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫‪) EV 1 - 20‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪(ISO 100 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻟﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ )ﻣﻣﻭﺝ–ﺣﺎﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﻏﺎﻣﻕ–ﻓﺎﺗﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ )ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ–ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻊ )ﻣﺣﺎﻳﺩ–ﺯﺍﻩٍ(‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻫﺎﺩﺉ–ﺩﺍﻓﺊ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ AE‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ Tv‬ﻭ‪ Av‬ﻭ‪ AE ،(M‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ AE ،‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ISO 100–12800‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻟـ ‪ 25600‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ(‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ AF) Hybrid CMOS AF II‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ‪ +‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫‪(AF‬‬
‫‪ ٤۹‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ(‬
‫‪) EV 1 - 18‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪ ،ISO 100 ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪(EF-M22mm f/2 STM‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪Servo AF ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻣﺞ )ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪(LED‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺞ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Tv‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Av‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ ±3 :‬ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ /‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪(ISO 100·m) ٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪ 1/4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ؛ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ‪ X‬ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ‪ ۱٥‬ﻣﻡ )ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ :‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪3‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫‪ ±2‬ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Drive mode‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪،ISO 200) Canon‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪UHS-I‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪MP4‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺑﺕ ﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ )ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‬
‫‪MPEG-4 AAC-LC‬‬
‫‪) 1920x1080‬ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ۲۹٫۹۷ :(Full HD‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )‪/ (NTSC‬‬
‫‪ ۲۳٫۹۸‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ* )‪ ۲٥٫۰۰ / (NTSC‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )‪(PAL‬‬
‫‪) 1280x720‬ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ٥۹٫۹٤ :(HD‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )‪/ (NTSC‬‬
‫‪ ٥۰٫۰۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )‪(PAL‬‬
‫‪) 640x480‬ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ۲۹٫۹۷ :(SD‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )‪/ (NTSC‬‬
‫‪ ۲٥٫۰۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )‪(PAL‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻲ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ‪ ۲۳٫۹۷٦ :‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲۹٫۹۷) 1920x1080‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ۲۳٫۹۸/‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ۲٥٫۰۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱۷۲٫٦‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :RAW‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۷‬ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ :JPEG‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ٦٫٤‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ MF) AF+MF ،MF ،AF‬ﻭ‪ MF‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ :AF+MF‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ‬
‫‪ 10x/5x‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻭﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪(MF‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪1:1 ،16:9 ،4:3 ،3:2‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫‪ ٥۹٫۹٤) 1280x720‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ٥۰٫۰۰/‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱۱٥٫٤‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲۹٫۹۷) 640x480‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ۲٥٫۰۰/‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲۲٫٤‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫‪Servo AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ 1/30‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1/4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻫﻭ ‪ 1/30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪24/25/30‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 50/60‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ(‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪) EV 1 - 20‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪(ISO 100 ،‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ 1/30‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1/4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺑﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ AF) Hybrid CMOS AF II‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ‪ +‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪(AF‬‬
‫‪) AF+MF ،MF ،AF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫)‪ MF‬ﻭ‪ MF‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ :AF+MF‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ MF‬ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬
‫‪ ±3‬ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ISO 100 – 6400‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻟـ ‪ 12800‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ(*‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ ﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪ ۷٫٥‬ﺳﻡ )‪ ۳٫۰‬ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ( )‪ ۱٫۰٤ / (3:2‬ﻣﻠﻳﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )‪ ٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ۱۸۰ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻭﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻧﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻭﻟﻧﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﺍﻧﻣﺎﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻐﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻧﻠﻧﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻁﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺭﻭﻳﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻭﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﻭﻧﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻭﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻭﻟﻧﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻛﺭﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳّﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ +‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ،(۱۱۰/٤۲/۱۲/٦‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1.5x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪10x‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ )ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ /‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻓﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺣﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۱۸۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) PictBridge‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪) RAW‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ(‪MP4 ،‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪1.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪OUT‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪) PictBridge‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪Hi-‬‬
‫‪(Speed USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪) C‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۸‬‬
‫‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪ ،(IEEE 802.11b) DS-SS‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪OFDM‬‬
‫)‪(IEEE 802.11g/n‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱٥‬ﻡ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﻲ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻭﺍﺋﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪ ۲٤٦۲-۲٤۱۲ :‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ‪ ۱۱-۱ :‬ﻗﻧﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ*‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫* ﺩﻋﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪ :‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ‪WPA2- ،WPA-PSK ،‬‬
‫‪PSK‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪AES ،TKIP ،WEP :‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪LP-E12 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪.ACK-E12‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ )‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲٥٥‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ؛‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ )‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ؛‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E12‬ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪) ۱۰۸٫۰‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ‪) ٦٦٫٦ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ۳٥٫۰ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ( ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۳۰۱‬ﺟﻡ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻭﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲٦٥‬ﺟﻡ )ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪NFC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪DLNA‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪۸٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫)ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫‪٦٫۸‬‬
‫‪2208‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪٤٫٤‬‬
‫‪3397‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪٥٫۸‬‬
‫‪2612‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪۳٫٦‬‬
‫‪4152‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪۳٫۰‬‬
‫‪5061‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪۲٫۰‬‬
‫‪7592‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪۱٫۸‬‬
‫‪8377‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪۰٫۳‬‬
‫‪48592‬‬
‫‪1000‬‬
‫‪۲۲٫۷‬‬
‫‪666‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪512‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۹‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪) Canon‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪،۳:۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO 200‬ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ UHS-I‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪ .Canon‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ )ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ۲٦‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪٥‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ ۱۷۲٫٦‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ۸‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻭ‪ ۲۷‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۱٥٫٤‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ۲۲‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲۲٫٤‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۹‬ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻧﻘﺿﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E12/LC-E12E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-M15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ۱٥ :‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪۱٫٤ - ۰٫٥‬‬
‫‪۰٫۹ - ۰٫٥‬‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫‪۲٫۰ - ۰٫٥‬‬
‫‪۱٫۳ - ۰٫٥‬‬
‫‪400‬‬
‫‪۲٫۹ - ۰٫٥‬‬
‫‪۱٫۸ - ۰٫٥‬‬
‫‪800‬‬
‫‪٤٫۰ - ۰٫۷‬‬
‫‪۲٫۹ - ۰٫٥‬‬
‫‪1600‬‬
‫‪٥٫۷ - ۱٫۰‬‬
‫‪۳٫٦ - ۰٫٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪3200‬‬
‫‪۸٫۱ - ۱٫٥‬‬
‫‪٥٫۱ - ۰٫۸‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.CIPA‬‬
‫‪6400‬‬
‫‪۱۱٫٤ - ۲٫۱‬‬
‫‪۱٫۷ - ۱٫۲‬‬
‫‪12800‬‬
‫‪۱٦٫۲ - ۲٫۹‬‬
‫‪۱۰٫۱ - ۱٫٦‬‬
‫‪) H‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪(25600‬‬
‫‪۲۲٫۹ - ٤٫۱‬‬
‫‪۱٤٫۳ - ۲٫٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E12‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۹۰‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ‪ ٤٥ :‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E12‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ(‬
‫‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫‪ ۸٫٤‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ٥٤۰ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ ٤۰ - ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪۸٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۷٫۲‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ ۸۷٥‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ٤۰ - ٥ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ۰ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪۸٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫● ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣُﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲٦‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ ‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹٦‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪٥۷ (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫‪۱۱۳ Camera Connect‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪۲٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ ‪۹۸‬‬
‫‪۱۲۱ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪۷۲ ،٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۱٥٦ ،۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۹٥‬‬
‫‪۱۱۲ DLNA‬‬
‫‪۱٥۸ DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ← ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫‪) M‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪٤۲‬‬
‫‪) MF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ( ‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪۱٥٤ ،۱٤۹ PictBridge‬‬
‫‪٤٤ RAW‬‬
‫‪٥۹ Servo AF‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۳‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪،۱۳۲‬‬
‫‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ← ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪۱٥۳ ،۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٥۷ AF‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫‪٥۹ Servo AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٥۷ AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫‪۱۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪٦۲ MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪۱٦۸ ،۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪۱٦۸ ،۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ← ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ← Q‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪٤۷ ،۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ← ۱٤۸‬ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ← ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫← ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ‪۱۸۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪) Auto‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۳٥ ،۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱٤۸ ،۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪۱٥٤ ،۱٥۱ ،۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱٥۳ ،۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٤۸ AE‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ ← SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٦۸‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦٤ FE‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻳﻝ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ )ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ‪۱۳٤ ،۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪٦۱ AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ← ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻁﻌﺎﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ ← ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪٦۲ MF‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻟﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٥۰ AE‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫‪۱۹۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٦۸‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪۱٥۱ ،۱٤۸ AC‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۳۱‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦٤ FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٥۱ ISO‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪۱٥۰ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪۱٥۳ ،۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪۱۱۲ Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻠﺹ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء ‪۸۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ‪ +‬ﺗﺗﺑﻊ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪٥۸ (AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫‪۱۹۳‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻫﻭ ‪) PC2179‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،WLAN‬ﻭﻫﻭ ‪.(WM227‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﺎﺏ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎﻙ ﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪،WLAN‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۹٤‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﻘﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻗﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﺍﺗﻳﺟﻳﺔ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺩ ﻣﻔﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ -‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻛﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻔﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺑﺙ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺫﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳُﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺻﻭﻻً ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺗﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻧﺗﺣﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﻫﺟﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻁﻼﻕ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺗﻙ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺟﻳﺩ ﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۹٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺿﻔﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ‪ ،DPS over IP‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ‪ App Store‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻭ‪ iPad‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪Apple Inc.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC.‬‬
‫● ®‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ®‪ Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻭ™‪ WPA‬ﻭ™‪ WPA2‬ﻭ™‪ Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ NFC Forum, Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻛﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard‬‬
‫‪and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or‬‬
‫‪decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for‬‬
‫‪a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider‬‬
‫‪licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant‬‬
‫‪video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪standard.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۹٦‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising